Compass
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017 Compass
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
17MK49-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2017
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................9
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................15
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . .........................................95
5
SAFETY ........................................................................131
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................197
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................247
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................283
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................337
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................349
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................407
12
INDEX..........................................................................413
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION .........................4
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING .....................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............5
▫ Essential Information ......................5
▫ Symbols ...............................6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................7
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience. When driving off-road, or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle, or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial, and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
4 INTRODUCTION
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Headlights
4 — Wheels/Tires
5 — Exterior Mirrors
6 — Doors
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Outlets 5 — Storage Bin 9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
2 — Demisters 6 — Glove Compartment 10 — Hazard Warning Flasher
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Climate Controls 11 — ESC OFF Switch – If Equipped
4 — Radio 8 — Power Outlet 12 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
12 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches
2 — Seats
3 — Radio
4 — Switch Panel
5 — Climate Controls
6 — Transmission Gear Selector
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................19
▫ A Word About Your Keys .................19
▫ Locking Doors With A Key ................19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ...........19
▫ Key Fob Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press ....20
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........20
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ..............20
▫ General Information .....................21
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................21
▫ Ignition Key Removal ....................21
▫ Key Fob-In-Ignition Reminder ..............23
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................23
▫ Replacement Key Fobs ...................24
▫ Customer Key Programming ...............24
▫ General Information .....................25
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .25
▫ To Arm The System .....................26
▫ Rearming The System ....................26
▫ To Disarm The System ....................26
▫ Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override .......26
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .26
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................27
▫ Remote Start Abort Message Display ..........27
▫ To Enter Remote Start ....................28
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................28
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................28
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ..........................29
3
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................29
▫ Power Door Locks ......................30
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ...............................32
䡵 SEATS ................................34
▫ Manual Seats...........................34
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ................36
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............38
▫ Folding Rear Seat .......................39
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped ...........40
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................40
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats ................................41
▫ Rear Head Restraints .....................43
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................43
▫ Tilt Steering Column .....................43
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................44
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ..................44
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....44
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver Side ..............45
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger Side ............45
▫ Folding Outside Mirrors ..................45
▫ Power Mirrors .........................46
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............46
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ..............46
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped .............................47
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................47
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights .............47
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......47
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................47
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................47
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........48
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................48
▫ Turn Signals ...........................49
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Lights-On Reminder .....................49
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ...............49
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................50
▫ Instrument Panel Dimming.................50
▫ Map/Reading Lights .....................50
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........51
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation................52
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .................52
▫ Windshield Washers .....................53
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ...............53
▫ Mist Feature ...........................53
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...............54
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................55
▫ Manual Climate Controls ..................55
▫ Automatic Climate Controls ................59
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .............................64
▫ Operating Tips .........................65
䡵 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ..........68
▫ Power Window Switches ..................68
▫ Auto-Down............................69
▫ Window Lockout Switch...................69
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..........70
▫ Opening .............................70
▫ Closing ..............................71
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................71
▫ Sunshade Operation......................71
▫ Pinch Protect Feature .....................72
▫ Sunroof Maintenance .....................72
▫ Ignition Off Operation ....................72
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ...........72
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................74
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
▫ Cargo Area Features .....................75
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .....78
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....79
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ...............80
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ...........81
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ........82
▫ Using HomeLink .......................84
▫ Security ..............................84
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .....................84
▫ General Information......................85
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES .....................86
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...................87
▫ Glove Compartment And Storage Bin .........87
▫ Door Storage ...........................88
▫ Electrical Power Outlets ..................89
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped ..............91
▫ Cupholders ............................92
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......93
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
A Word About Your Keys
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These num-
bers can be used to order duplicate Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) key fobs. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door,
turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn the key
to the left. Refer to ”Body Lubrication” in Dealer Service”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Key Fob Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display/Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
• For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Push and hold the lock button on a programmed key
fob for at least four seconds but no longer than ten
seconds. Then, push and hold the unlock button
while still holding the lock button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by
pushing the lock/unlock buttons on the key fob with
the ignition in the lock position and the key fob
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to its previous setting.
NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are inside the vehicle will activate the vehicle security
alarm. Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock
button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in this section for further informa-
tion.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the key fob buttons facing down, use a flat
blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the key fob
apart. Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal
during removal.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Place the ignition in the ACC (Accessory) position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
Separating Case Halves
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
4. Remove the key from the ignition. NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
gear selector in PARK, the key may become trapped
temporarily in the ignition. If this occurs, place the gear
selector in PARK, rotate the key clockwise slightly, and
then remove the key as described above. If a malfunction
occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition to warn
you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be
started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from
the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
Ignition Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key Fob-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal
to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not lock, and key fob
will not function.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses key fobs that have an embedded electronic
chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone
uses an invalid key to try to start the engine.
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
or lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after placing the ignition in the
on position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the vehicle security light begins
to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid key to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is
one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle key fobs with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid key fobs, you can program new key
fobs to the Sentry Key Immobilizer system by performing
the following procedure:
1. Cut the additional key(s) to match the ignition and lock
cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition. Place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, place the
ignition in the LOCK position and remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition. Place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position within 15 seconds.
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Place the
ignition in the LOCK position and remove the second
key.
4. Insert a blank key into the ignition. Place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the
Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that
programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light
will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off.
The new key is programmed. The key fob will also be
programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed key fob, contact your autho-
rized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key fob is lost, see your autho-
rized dealer to have all remaining key fobs erased from the
system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining key fobs must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle key fobs must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro-
grammed.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle security alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks are disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides
both audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the
headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, igni-
tion) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail lights
will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition and get out of the
vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
or the key fob lock button and close all doors.
3. The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This shows
that the vehicle security alarm is arming. During this
period, if a door is opened, the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, or the power door locks are un-
locked in any manner, the vehicle security alarm will
automatically disarm. After approximately 16 seconds,
the vehicle security light will flash slowly. This shows
that the vehicle security alarm is fully armed.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the horn
after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15
minutes, and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm
itself.
To Disarm The System
Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key into the
ignition and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and exterior
lights blink three times when you unlock the doors. Check
the vehicle for tampering. The vehicle security alarm is
designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the vehicle security alarm will arm
unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and lock the
doors with the key fob, once the vehicle security alarm is
armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to
exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the unlock
button on the key fob to disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to remote start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle, while
still maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m). Obstructions between
the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message Display
The following messages will display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The message stays active until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Enter Remote Start
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
Remote Start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.
• Any engine warning lamps come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then,
insert the key into the ignition and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the lock knob is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Door Lock Knob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on the driver’s and
front passenger’s door panel. Push these switches to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate.
NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle, the
power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in
the ignition and either front door is open. A chime will
sound as a reminder to remove the key.
Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automati-
cally when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
Driver Power Door Lock Switch
1 — Unlock Doors And Liftgate
2 — Lock Doors And Liftgate
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Lock Doors Programming
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 15 seconds, place the ignition between LOCK
and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times,
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, push the power door lock switch
to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to its previous setting.
NOTE:
• If you do not hear the chime, it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will need
to repeat the procedure.
• Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance with
local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
• The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
• The transmission was in gear, and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The doors were not previously unlocked.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 15 seconds, place the ignition between LOCK
and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK five times,
ending up in the ON/RUN position (do not start the
engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, push the power door unlock
switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to its previous setting.
NOTE:
• If you do not hear the chime, it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will need
to repeat the procedure.
• Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seats
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar
is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. While
sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the inboard or
outboard side of the seatback. Rotate the lever downward
to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward
to decrease the lumbar support.
Driver’s Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired angle and release
the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward
and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s seat.
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up,
down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Outboard Lumbar Adjustment Lever
Recline Lever
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 30
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. When
the LO-level heating is selected, the system automatically
turns the heater and the indicator light OFF after approxi-
mately 30 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to fold the rear
seatback flat.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward and lift the
seatback into its upright position.
Rear Seat Release Straps
Folded Rear Seat
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just enough
to release the seatback latch. Then, push the seatback to a
reclined position, approximately 35 degrees maximum,
and release the strap.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats
Active Head Restraints (AHRs) are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for
further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint,
refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further
information.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted Position)
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
Rear Head Restraints
The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for information on
Tether routing.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt steering column lever is located on
the left side of the steering column, below the turn signal
lever.
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Push the lever up
to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical
mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The on/off
symbol on the button will illuminate when the auto-
dimming feature is enabled.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving
in REVERSE.
Inside Day/Night Mirror
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side of
your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle
with your head close to the door glass.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Folding Outside Mirrors
The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved, manu-
ally, either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full rear-
ward and normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Power Mirrors
The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or
right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in
the direction you want the mirror to move.
When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
control to the center position to prevent accidentally mov-
ing a mirror.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Power Mirror Control
Vanity Mirror
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visors may be extended out to provide more
coverage of the side glass.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent to
turn on the parking lights. Turn the end of the lever to the
second detent to turn on the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (lower intensity) whenever the ignition is ON, the
engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, the turn signal is off and the gear selector is in
any position except PARK.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will
shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Headlight Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third
detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight sys-
tem.
With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn off
based on the surrounding light levels.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
pull out the end of the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights
on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Front Fog Light Operation
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the instrument cluster display. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Turn Signal Operation
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Instrument Panel Dimming
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom
position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and
prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is
opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the
rear view mirror. Each light is turned on by pushing the
button. Push the button a second time to turn the light off.
The lights also come on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
Dimmer Control
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The lights will remain on until the switch is pushed a
second time, so be sure they have been turned off before
leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off automatically.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is lo-
cated on the right side of the steering column. The
front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in
this section.
Map/Reading Lights
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles,
desirable. Select the delay interval by turning the end of the
lever. Rotate the end of the lever upward (clockwise) to
decrease the delay time and downward (counterclockwise)
to increase the delay time. The delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every second.
Windshield Wiper Operation
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed while
the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval previ-
ously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the instrument cluster display. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Mist Feature
Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe to
clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the wipers will
continue to operate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the center portion of the control lever. The
control lever is located on the right side of the steering
column.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent position for rear wiper operation.
Mist Operation
Rear Wiper/Washer Control Lever
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
only.
Rotate the center portion of the lever past the
first detent to activate the rear washer. The
washer pump and the wiper will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held (for a
maximum of 10 seconds). Upon release, the wiper will
continue to cycle two times before returning to the set
position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and
will not go to “park”.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Manual Climate Controls
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Modes Control
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Automatic Climate Controls
Automatic Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the OFF position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
AUTO Setting
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the lower numbers on the scale, indicates
cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the higher numbers on the scale, indi-
cates warmer temperatures.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Modes Control
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower
Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred
Automatic. This means the operator can override the
blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range
for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The
blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the
Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right).
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
proper coolant selection.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for proper coolant selection. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not rec-
ommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compres-
sor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auto-
matically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for filter replacement instructions.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows. There are single window
controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate
the passenger door windows. The window controls will
operate when the ignition placed in the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, the power window switches will remain active
for 45 seconds after the ignition is placed in the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, the power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switch Location
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger
doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passen-
ger doors, push the window lockout switch. To enable the
rear window controls, push the window lockout switch a
second time.
Window Lockout Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to children. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Opening
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Power Sunroof Switch
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any other
actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Instrument Cluster
Display
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The Instrument Cluster
Display
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel.
2. Move the safety latch, located outside the vehicle under
the front edge of the hood, toward the center and raise
the hood.
Hood Release Lever
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
facing hood) of the engine compartment to secure the hood
in the open position. Place the hood prop at the location
stamped into the inner hood surface.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch Location Prop Rod Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is
fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm down-
ward push at the center front edge of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage. Never drive your
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used
to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and turn
it to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate can
also be unlocked using the key fob or by activating the
power door lock switches located on the front doors. The
central locking/unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be
activated from the liftgate key cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key fob. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction, or the key fob is
inoperative, insert the key fob into the liftgate lock
cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock models
only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the liftgate open
with one fluid motion.
• Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,
the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a
snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in
the event of an electrical system malfunction.
Liftgate Handle Location
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. How-
ever, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Light
The light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area
to illuminate the cargo area.
Cargo Cover
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mount-
ing the available tonneau cover that accommodates the
reclining rear seat.
To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover
into one of the two notches located in the rear trim panels.
With one of the cover ends installed, push inward on the
opposite end and install it into the same notch location of
the rear trim panel.
Rear Trim Notches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide the
rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides of the
rear trim panel.
WARNING!
In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be washed
with mild soap and water.
Cargo Cover Guides
Removable Load Floor
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are four tie-downs (D-rings) installed in the cargo
area for securing cargo.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision a loop
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading
your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Cargo Area Tie-Downs
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down off
the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and other
activities.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
Fold Down Speakers
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufac-
turer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
CONSOLE FEATURES
The floor console contains both an upper and lower storage
compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on
the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid
open.
To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on the
lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compartment
and lift the lid open.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Compartment
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Glove Compartment And Storage Bin
Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are
an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on the
release handle.
Storage Bins
1 — Upper Storage Bin
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Door Storage
The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage
areas.
Front Door Storage
Rear Door Storage
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Power Outlets
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located
in the Integrated Center Stack (ICS) for added convenience.
This power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics
and other low power devices.
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into
the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element, do not
hold the lighter in the heating position.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and
element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
12 Volt Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Outlet Fuse Location
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the
front of the center console for added convenience. This
outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain
high-end video games consoles will exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually,
unplug the device and plug it in again. To avoid overload-
ing the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
115 Volt Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Cupholders
Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are
two illuminated cupholders located in the front.
Front Cupholders
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear
passengers.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the cargo
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built spe-
cifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the luggage rack cross-
bars. The luggage rack does not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of
cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
The crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven
detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to
prevent movement. To move the crossbars, loosen the
thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar
approximately eight turns, then move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars perpendicular to
the luggage rack side rails. Once the crossbar is in one of
the seven detent positions, retighten the thumb screws to
lock the crossbar into position.
Rear Cupholders
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in
use, place the front crossbar in the first detent from the
front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the second
detent from the rear of the vehicle.
• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed over
the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may expe-
rience interruption of satellite radio reception. For im-
proved satellite radio reception, place the rear crossbar
in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when
not in use.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your ve-
hicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the luggage rack without
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between the
load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the luggage rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum luggage rack load capacity
of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
•
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area
should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...................97
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions .............97
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF
EQUIPPED .............................100
▫ Interactive Display And Controls ............100
▫ Oil Change Indicator System ...............103
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Functions ........103
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio..............103
▫ Average Fuel Economy ...................104
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) .................104
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) ...............104
▫ Elapsed Time ..........................104
▫ Display Units Of Measure In ...............104
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) ............................105
䡵 MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED ......109
▫ Control Buttons ........................109
▫ STEP Button ..........................109
▫ RESET Button .........................109
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO)....................110
䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES.............................110
▫ Red Telltale Lights ......................111
▫ Yellow Telltale Lights ....................116
▫ Green Telltale Lights.....................124
▫ Blue Telltale Lights......................125
▫ White Telltale Lights.....................126
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .127
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................127
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
• The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
Instrument Cluster
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer
of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same as
it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must
be reset at zero.
2. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4. Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped / Odometer
Display / Trip Odometer Display
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in this section for further
information.
Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door .............................Door Open
gATE ...........................Liftgate Open
LoW tirE .....................LowTirePressure
gASCAP ........................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ...........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ................OilChange Required
LoCOOL .........................LowCoolant
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display area located in the instru-
ment cluster.
Refer to ”Instrument Cluster Display” in this section for
further information.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer dis-
play will toggle between “LoW” and “tirE” for three cycles.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the STEP
button on the steering wheel to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Igni-
tion Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. Refer to “Fuses” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information on fuses and fuse locations.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The odometer display will toggle between
“CHAngE” and “Oil” for approximately 12 seconds, after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled
oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle-based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Interactive Display And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The menu items consists of the following:
• System Status
• Units
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Heading
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect Phone Displays (If Equipped)
• Audio Mode Display
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
MENU Button
Push and release the MENU button to scroll through the
main menus (Fuel Economy, Warnings, Timer, Units, Sys-
tem, Personal Settings) or to exit submenus.
Compass Button
Push and release the compass button to display one of
eight compass readings and the outside temperature or to
exit submenus.
Steering Wheel Control Buttons
1 — MENU Button 3 — Right Arrow Button
2 — Compass Button 4 — Down Arrow Button
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button for access to main
menus, submenus, or to select a personal setting in the
setup menu.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the submenus.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following mes-
sages display:
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime after
1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Avail. — Vehicle is not in PARK
(automatic transmission), or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmission)
• Door Open (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion)
• Doors Open (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion)
• Gate (with vehicle graphic showing the liftgate open and
a single chime)
• Headlamps or Park Lamps On
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• Key In Ignition
• Low Tire
• Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System
• Service TPM System
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Indicator System
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for approximately
five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means
the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the Trip
Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil
change indicator system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Place the ignition in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Functions
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Units In
• Elapsed Time
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pushing and holding the right arrow button once will clear
the function currently being displayed. Reset will only
occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed.
To reset all resettable functions, push and release the right
arrow button a second time within three seconds of reset-
ting the currently displayed function. Reset ALL will be
displayed during this three-second window.
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Push and release the compass button to display one of
eight compass headings to indicate the direction the ve-
hicle is facing, the outside temperature, and the current
radio station.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset
(pushing and holding the right arrow button as prompted
in the instrument cluster display to reset). When the fuel
economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or show
dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will
be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last
fuel reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of
fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a
new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current
values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank
level.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
“Safety” for system operation.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is placed in
the RUN/START position.
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
hours: minutes: seconds
Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the right
arrow button (as prompted in the display). Upon reset, all
digits will change to zeros, and time will start again if the
ignition is in the RUN or START position.
Display Units Of Measure In
To make your selection, push and release the right arrow
button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).
Push and release the MENU or down arrow button until
“Personal Settings” is displayed in the instrument cluster
display then push and release the right arrow button.
Use the right arrow button to highlight your MENU/
SUBMENU choices:
Language
When in this display, you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pushing the right arrow button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, Francais, or NL de-
pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h). Push
and hold the right arrow button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected, all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened, if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position (auto-
matic transmission). Push and hold the right arrow button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make
your selection.
Key Fob Unlock
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected, only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button
and require a second push to unlock the remaining locked
doors. When Remote Unlock All Doors is selected, all of the
doors will unlock at the first push of the key fob unlock
button. Push and hold the right arrow button when in this
display until “Driver’s Door 1st” or “All Doors” appears to
make your selection.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the key
fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
horn with lock feature selected. Push and hold the right
arrow button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF”
appears to make your selection.
Sound Horn With Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the key fob lock button is pushed. This feature may be
selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature.
Push and hold the right arrow button when in this display
until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. Push and hold the right arrow button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only)
When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately
ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the headlights
were turned on by this feature, they will also turn off when
the wipers are turned off. To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle.”
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected the power window switches,
radio, Uconnect phone, power sunroof, and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned OFF. Opening either front vehicle
door will cancel this feature. Push and hold the right arrow
button when in this display until “OFF,” “45 sec.”, “5
min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make your selection.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the key fob. Push and hold the right arrow
button when in this display until “OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,”
or “90 sec.” appears to make your selection.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When “On” is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for system
function and operating information. To make your selec-
tion, push and release the right arrow button until “On” or
“Off” appears.
Display Units In
The instrument cluster display, odometer, and Uconnect
GPS system units can be changed between US and Metric.
Push and hold the right arrow button when in this display
until “US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic, and the instrument cluster
display will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360 – degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the
instrument cluster display turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the instrument cluster display, you must
put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as
follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the gear selector in PARK in
order to enter the instrument cluster display Program-
ming Menus.
2. Push and release the MENU button until the Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) menu dis-
plays in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and release the down arrow button until “Cali-
brate Compass” displays in the instrument cluster dis-
play.
4. Push and release the right arrow button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the
instrument cluster display.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
5. Complete one or more 360 – degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the
top of the right rear quarter window. This is where the
compass sensor is located.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the compass button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Push and release the down arrow button until “Com-
pass Variance” message and the last variance zone
number displays in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the right arrow button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Push and release the compass button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be
driven several minutes before the updated temperature is
displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the dis-
played temperature; therefore, temperature readings are
not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Control Buttons
STEP Button
Push the STEP button located on the steering wheel to
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Func-
tions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition to the ON
position, then push and hold the RESET button located on
the steering wheel.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
The following displays can be reset or changed:
• Trip A
• Trip B
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Push and release the STEP button on the instrument
cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you
to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make
sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your
vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight sec-
onds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s or passenger seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuck-
led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
English
Metric
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light re-
mains on with the vehicle under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is under power, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Yellow Telltale Lights
Engine Malfunction Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors emissions control systems. The light will illuminate when the igni-
tion is in the ON position before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not come on when placing the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after vehicle start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typi-
cal driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the vehicle is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or
serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. It should go out when the engine is running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC sys-
tem. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON, even
if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
NOTE: This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the ben-
efits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage
the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Green Telltale Lights
Turn Signal Warning Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected,
as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction le-
ver is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
White Telltale Lights
Cruise Control On Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control On Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Speed Control System is turned on.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improp-
erly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “click-
ing” sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap
is properly tightened. Push the trip odometer RESET
button to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL.
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................132
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............132
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............133
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............142
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......142
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........150
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........150
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............150
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................151
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........166
▫ Child Restraints .......................178
▫ Transporting Pets ......................193
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................193
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................193
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................193
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................194
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................196
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
132 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill Descent
Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
5
SAFETY 133
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
134 SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting using your instrument cluster display, refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
5
SAFETY 135
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
136 SAFETY
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has three available operating modes for
four–wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available
operating modes for two–wheel drive equipped vehicles.
5
SAFETY 137
Full On (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On (Two-Wheel
Drive Models)
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving situa-
tions. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “ESC
Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On (Two-
Wheel Drive Models)
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the “ESC
Off” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled, and the ⬙ESC OFF
Indicator Light⬙ will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions, and more wheel spin than ESC would normally
allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pushing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation
requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the
“ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced. Trailer Sway control (TSC)
(if equipped) is disabled when the ESC system is in the
ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
138 SAFETY
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
pushing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds
when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running.
After five seconds, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
illuminate and the “ESC OFF” message will appear in the
odometer. Push and release the Trip Odometer button
located on the instrument cluster to clear this message.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until the
vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At 35 mph
(56 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off” mode, as
described above. TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed
drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC system shuts off.
ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not
interfere with off-road driving however, ESC function
returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above
35 mph (56 km/h). The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
always be illuminated when ESC is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed
into the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the
message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ⴖFull Offⴖ mode, the engine torque reduction and
stability features are disabled. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
5
SAFETY 139
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
140 SAFETY
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during off-road driving situations. HDC will automatically
apply the brakes to control downhill speed to between
4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending on terrain.
The system is activated by placing the vehicle in “Off-
Road” mode and placing the gear selector in LOW or
REVERSE. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When HDC is properly enabled, the “Hill Decent
Control Light” in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated.
HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only
activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not
activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully
deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC “Full Off”
mode. This is done by pushing and holding the “ESC Off”
button for five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of the manual.
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like nor-
mal. When either the brake or the accelerator is released,
HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed.
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At
vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), HDC will no
longer function. If the “HDC Indicator Light” begins to
flash, this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and
the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.
5
SAFETY 141
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re-
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on “cold
inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
142 SAFETY
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON. In
this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
5
SAFETY 143
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
144 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will be
displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
chime will be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW TIRE
message will turn off once the updated tire pressures have
been received.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat
providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with
any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
5
SAFETY 145
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this infor-
mation.
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the
proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
146 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be
activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once every
ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “LOW
TIRE” text message for a minimum of five seconds and a
graphic of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flash-
ing.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible and inflate
all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The
system will automatically update, the “LOW TIRE” text
message will no longer be displayed, the graphic display of
the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressure(s) have been received.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
5
SAFETY 147
Service TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
The instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
text message is then followed by a graphic display, with “-
-“ in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ text
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur with
any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The instrument cluster will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds when a
system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ mes-
sage is then followed with a graphic display with pressure
values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values
are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may
not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system
still needs to be serviced as long as the ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
148 SAFETY
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “LOW TIRE”
text message and the graphic with the low tire pressure
flashing will be displayed.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure values.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster will display a “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure values.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this infor-
mation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5
SAFETY 149
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
150 SAFETY
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
5
SAFETY 151
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
152 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
5
SAFETY 153
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
154 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5
SAFETY 155
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
156 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
5
SAFETY 157
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center seat belt features a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored
out of the way in the right side trim panel for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
Mini-Latch Stowage
158 SAFETY
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate
and regular latch plate into its stowed position.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
5
SAFETY 159
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
160 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 161
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
162 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components,
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily iden-
tified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
5
SAFETY 163
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seatback
164 SAFETY
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Supplemental
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a colli-
sion, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
forward and separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Triggered
5
SAFETY 165
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
166 SAFETY
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
5
SAFETY 167
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIR-
BAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster
168 SAFETY
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
5
SAFETY 169
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
170 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
5
SAFETY 171
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
172 SAFETY
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
5
SAFETY 173
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover
sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretension-
ers, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the
vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
174 SAFETY
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
5
SAFETY 175
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
176 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
5
SAFETY 177
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
178 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
5
SAFETY 179
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
180 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
5
SAFETY 181
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
182 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
Latch Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 183
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
Yes You can install child restraints with flex-
ible lower anchors in the center position.
The inner anchorages are 15.5 inches
(390 mm) apart. Do not install child re-
straints with rigid lower anchors in the
center position.
Can two child restraints be attached us-
ing a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard posi-
tion.
184 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower LATCH Anchors
5
SAFETY 185
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH: Four Door
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
186 SAFETY
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you must
use the seat belt for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for installing child seats in the outboard positions.
Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation in-
structions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
5
SAFETY 187
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
188 SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 189
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt
to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
190 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
5
SAFETY 191
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat, routing
it over the center of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
192 SAFETY
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or
injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips since vehicle equipped with a gas
engine the following applies:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
5
SAFETY 193
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
194 SAFETY
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an addi-
tional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side
floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle
properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the
accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with
the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor
mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 195
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
196 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................199
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........199
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ......199
▫ Normal Starting ........................200
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) .200
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................200
▫ After Starting..........................201
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .201
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .201
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................202
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . .204
▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission ............204
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ...............205
▫ Downshifting .........................206
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .206
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................207
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .207
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped ............................208
▫ Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission
(CVT) — If Equipped ....................214
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED ............................219
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................219
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............220
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........220
▫ To Activate ...........................221
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................221
▫ To Deactivate .........................222
6
▫ To Resume Speed ......................222
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................222
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................223
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ............................223
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................225
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................225
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............226
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................226
▫ Certification Label ......................226
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................228
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............229
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................231
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................232
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............233
▫ Towing Requirements ...................233
▫ Towing Tips ..........................237
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................239
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .239
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................240
▫ On-Road Driving Tips ...................240
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips ...................240
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake and remove
the key fob from the ignition. When leaving the
vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the gear
selector in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked,
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on
the locking mechanism and then turn the key.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
Tip Start
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will
disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automati-
cally in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not
require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Simply
turn the ignition switch to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15
seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proce-
dure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If
the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
so follow the procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” and “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. Press the accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no
more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Nor-
mal Starting” procedure.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an auto-
matic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can
result from starting in a gear higher than first gear.
CAUTION!
• Launching in any gear except 1st gear will result in
excessive slipping of the clutch and potentially lug-
ging or stalling the engine.
(Continued)
Shift Pattern
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear.
Be sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third),
when starting from a standing position. Damage to
the clutch can result from starting in a gear higher
than first gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only the
lower gears. For steady highway driving with light accel-
erations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, and
never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in the following table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
Engine Size Acceleration
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
All Engines Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and pro-
long engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at
too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause
the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch
and the transmission can result from skipping a gear
while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed
(i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down
to second or first gear when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmis-
sion out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise
shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to
“AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Transmission)” in this
section). Moving the gear selector to the left or right (-/+)
while in the DRIVE position will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leav-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first, second, third, and fourth
gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Transmission)” in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller will modify the trans-
mission shift schedule and expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating. If the transmis-
sion becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light” may illuminate and the transmission
may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),
transmission operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Transmission) — If
Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the six available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap the
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
gear selector to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE
position. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will down-
shift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using
(+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear.
When AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when the driver moves the gear selector to the right (+) or
left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below:
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the gear selector to the
right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode
at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will auto-
matically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions
are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is in-
hibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the transmis-
sion is sufficiently warm.
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission
(CVT) — If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis-
sion (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This
may sometimes ⬙feel⬙ as if it is slipping, but this is normal
and does not harm anything.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to
⬙AutoStick (CVT)⬙ in this section). Moving the gear selector
to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will
manually select from a set of predefined transmission gear
ratios, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leav-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in
or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
WARNING! (Continued)
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick (CVT)” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear ratio. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear ratio will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow-
ing up long grades on hot days, the automatic
transmission oil may become too hot. If this hap-
pens, the transmission overheat indicator light will
come on, and the vehicle will slow slightly until the transmis-
sion cools down enough to allow a return to the requested
speed. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating
may reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
AutoStick (CVT) — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding six manually selectable gear ratios, giving you more
control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This sys-
tem can also provide you with more control during pass-
ing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Operation
NOTE: AutoStick is not available until the CVT warms up
in cold weather.
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, AutoStick
is activated by moving the gear selector side-to-side. Mov-
ing the gear selector to the right (+) will activate AutoStick
and shift up to the next higher manual ratio, unless you are
already operating in or near Overdrive, in which case sixth
gear ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving the gear
selector to the left (-) will activate AutoStick and shift to the
next lower manual ratio. The manually-selected gear will
be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
shift is chosen, except as described below:
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• Heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) application will
disengage AutoStick mode.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the gear selector to the
right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time, on-demand, four–wheel
drive (4WD).
Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if additional
traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose traction
surfaces, activate the “4WD LOCK” switch by pulling up
once and releasing. This locks the center coupling allowing
more torque to be sent to the rear wheels. The “4WD
Indicator Light” will come on in the cluster. This can be
done on the fly, at any vehicle speed. To deactivate, simply
pull on the switch one more time. The “4WD Indicator
Light” will then go out.
NOTE: Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Safety” for further
information.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
Four-Wheel Drive Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coor-
dinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button. The cruise control indicator light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise control indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle. The
static grid lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. Different
colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate dis-
tances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side of
the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Warning And
Indicator Lights” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and push the odometer/trip odometer RESET
button to turn the message off. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Maximum GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
2.4L
Auto/Man with Trailer
Tow Prep Package (AHC)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
2.4L Auto With Freedom
Drive II Off Road Package
(AWL)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further infor-
mation.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur while
in this range, use the AutoStick shift control (if equipped)
to select a lower gear ratio.
NOTE:
• Using a lower gear ratio while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
• If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
mission fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing⬙. Refer to the ⬙Maintenance
Plan⬙ for the proper maintenance intervals.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest
gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids
frequent downshifts. For example, choose ⬙4⬙ if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose ⬙3⬙ or ⬙2⬙ if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driv-
ing at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to
avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher
gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions
allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow None
• Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
• Key in ACC Position
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front FWD Models ONLY FWD Models ONLY
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer All OK OK
NOTE:
• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be
recreational towed (flat towed) at any legal highway
speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in
NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal dam-
age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a dolly is used when recreational towing.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design character-
istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
tional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-
road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain
a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns
or braking. In most cases there are no road signs, posted
speed limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use
your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not.
When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for
surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other com-
bustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust
system could cause a fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD Lock
Lever Engaged — If Equipped
When driving off-road, shift into low (L Off-Road [if
equipped] ) and activate the 4WD LOCK. This will provide
additional traction and activates the numerous off-road
features to improve handling and control on slippery or
difficult terrain. Due to the sustained lower gearing, low (L
Off-Road [if equipped] ) with 4WD LOCK engaged will
allow the engine to operate in a higher power range. This
will allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills,
with improved control and less effort.
NOTE: For maximum off-road performance, premium
fuel is recommended. While the vehicle will operate on
regular fuel when in L Off-Road mode (if equipped), the
engine has been calibrated for maximum performance
using premium fuel.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore, you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the
transaxle to low (L Off-Road [if equipped] ) if necessary. Do
not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This
will allow the tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain
your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM’s or vehicle speeds because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use low (L
Off-Road [if equipped] ) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and
maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if
there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain
your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The key to
driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure,
accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and main-
taining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are going to be
driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire
pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a
greater tire surface area. You should use low (L Off-Road [if
equipped] ) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and ESC turned
off. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your
traction and handling, while driving on the soft sand, but
you must return the tires to normal air pressure before
driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you
have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the
pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to
climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel
confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should
always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is
on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then you should use
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
low (L Off-Road [if equipped]) with the 4WD LOCK
engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your mo-
mentum as you climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up
for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the
hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front
end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the
top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of
a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly
back and forth. This will provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the
surface and will usually provide enough traction to com-
plete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the
vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
Driving Down Hill
Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow con-
trolled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent?
Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain
control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident
in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in low (L
Off-Road [if equipped] ) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and
proceed with caution. Allow engine and hill descent brak-
ing to control the descent and apply your brakes if neces-
sary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the down-hill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a down-hill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll-
over, which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing engine and hill descent
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in RE-
VERSE gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL
using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally
across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible, and only be
attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicles abili-
ties and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You
should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep
water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake.
If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Determine
if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low
and slow. You want to use low (L Off-Road [if equipped] )
with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maxi-
mum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not
try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any
water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you
should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
ingestion.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the transaxle, transfer case, engine
or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or
through too deep of water. Water can cause permanent
damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle compo-
nents and your brakes will be less effective once wet
and/or muddy.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick.
You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current
and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not
be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water
depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on
the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effective-
ness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............249
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................249
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................249
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................250
䡵 FUSES ................................251
▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) ............252
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........256
▫ Jack Location .........................256
▫ Spare Tire Stowage .....................256
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................256
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................257
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................262
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........264
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................264
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .265
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........266
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........267
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ............272
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ...............272
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ..................274
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............275
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OVERHEATING ........................276
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............276
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............277
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............279
▫ With Ignition Key.......................280
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base. Alumi-
num base bulbs are not approved and should not be used
for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Header Lamp T578
Center Dome Lamp T578
Rear Cargo Lamp/Flashlight 8–A35LFAA
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamp H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp 3757KA
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
Bulb Number
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED Assembly (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamp 3157
Backup Lamp W16W (921)
License Lamp W5W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the
headlamp.
2. Reach into the engine compartment and pull the red
lock out at the green connector.
3. Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling
straight back.
4. Twist the bulb to the left.
5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch the
bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers could
cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life.
Fog Lamps
1. Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout.
2. Remove electrical connector from bulb.
3. Remove bulb from housing.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
1. Remove the two push-pins from the taillamp housing.
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the
lamp from the aperture panel.
3. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
4. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
License Lamps
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb from socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Taillamp Push-Pins
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that iden-
tifies each component may be printed on the inside of the
cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow – If Equipped
2 – 15 Amp Lt Blue AWD/4WD Control Mod-
ule – If Equipped
3 – 10 Amp Red Rear Center Brake Light
Switch
4 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch/Clock
Spring
5 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Battery Feed For Power
Tech
Integrated Power Module
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror/Steering
Control Satellite Radio/
Hands-Free Phone
7 – 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw
8 – 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw
9 40 Amp Green – Power Seats
10 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Locks/Interior
Lighting
11 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Outlet
12 – 20 Amp Yellow 115V AC Inverter – If
Equipped
13 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
14 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Cluster
15 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan
16 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Dome Lamp/Sunroof/Rear
Wiper Motor
17 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module
18 40 Amp Green – Auto Shutdown Relay
19 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio Amplifiers
20 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Radio
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
21 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren –
If Equipped
22 – 10 Amp Red Heating, AC/Compass
23 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay
24 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Sunroof – If
Equipped
25 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror – If
Equipped
26 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay
27 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module
28 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module/
Occupant Classification
Module
29 – – Hot Vehicle (No Fuse Re-
quired)
30 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seat – If Equipped
31 – 10 Amp Red Headlamp Washer – If
Equipped
32 30 Amp Pink – Auto Shutdown Relay
33 – 10 Amp Red J1962 Conn/Powertrain
Control Module
254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
34 30 Amp Pink – Antilock BrakeValve
35 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brake Pump
36 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp/Washer
Control/Smart Glass – If
Equipped
37 – 25 Amp Clear Diesel Heater and H2/MOD
power top
CAUTION!
• When installing the IPM cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into
the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in
the cargo area.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
Spare Tire And Jack Stowage
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for further information about the spare tire, it’s use, and
operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare
wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to
loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the
jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with
two attachment points. When the jack is partially ex-
panded, the tension between the two attachment points
holds the jack handle in place.
Jack Warning Label
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body. The front locations are outlined by two
triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill flange
assembly. The rear location is the same but with two
rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with plastic
trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking
locations in the body.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
Jacking Locations
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed
under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned,
turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is
properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel
to be changed.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
4. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the
jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel
nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align
the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel cover
onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
lug nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for proper
lug nut torque.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Release the parking brake. Reassemble the lug
wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire
area. Secure the assembly using the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.
11. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Install the five wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the load floor in the
cargo area.
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button
(4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bot-
tom side of the Tire Service Kit)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the park-
ing brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning on the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to
Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access
the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two
finger screws, located on the radiator support.
Air Intake Finger Screws
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission to NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Positive Battery Post
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this
Jump-Starting procedure.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
5. Reinstall the air intake duct.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the
instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn
off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
may become too hot.
If the transmission overheat warning light
turns on,
you will experience reduced performance until the
automatic transmission cools down. Stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL until the light turns off. Once the transmis-
sion has cooled down and the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally. If the high speed is main-
tained, the overheating may reoccur.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located on the right
side of the gear selector housing).
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN
position, but do not start the engine.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheels OFF
The Ground
Manual Trans-
mission
6-Speed Auto-
matic (FWD
Only)
6-Speed Auto-
matic 4WD
CVT Automatic
Transmission
Flat Tow NONE
• Transmission
in NEUTRAL
• Key in ACC
or ON/RUN
position
If transmission
is operable:
• Transmission
in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph
(40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles
(24 km) max
distance
If transmission
is operable:
• Transmission
in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph
(40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles
(24 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Front FWD Models
ONLY
OK NOT
ALLOWED
FWD Models
ONLY
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
With Ignition Key
Automatic Transmission
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with
the front wheels elevated, or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels OFF the ground).
• Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles can be towed on a
flatbed truck (all four wheels OFF the ground).
If the transmission is operable, Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
and Four Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles, with the 6-speed
automatic transmission only ( NOT the Continuously
Variable automatic transmission [CVT]), may be flat towed
(with all four wheels on the ground) under the following
conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) models (with 6-speed automatic
only) may also be towed (under the same limitations
shown above) with the rear wheels elevated.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a CVT
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty..
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
Manual Transmission
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels
elevated.
• FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck
(all wheels OFF the ground).
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition is
related to the clutch, transmission or driveline. Ad-
ditional damage to the drivetrain could result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine, transmission, or
drivetrain damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
All Transmissions
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmis-
sion remains in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Ve-
hicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................285
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................286
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................290
▫ 2.0L Engine ..........................290
▫ 2.4L Engine ..........................291
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................292
▫ Cooling System ........................292
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................293
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................293
▫ Engine Oil ...........................294
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................295
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............295
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................297
▫ Body Lubrication ......................298
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................298
▫ Exhaust System ........................299
▫ Cooling System ........................300
▫ Brake System .........................305
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........307
▫ Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If
Equipped ............................307
▫ Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped . .309
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) — AWD/4WD Models
Only ...............................310
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) — AWD/4WD Models
Only ...............................311
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................311
䡵 TIRES.................................311
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................311
8
▫ Tires — General Information ..............318
▫ Tire Types ............................324
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................326
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............327
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............329
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............329
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................330
▫ Treadwear ............................330
▫ Traction Grades ........................330
▫ Temperature Grades .....................331
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................331
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................332
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........332
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........332
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................332
䡵 INTERIORS ............................334
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................334
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................334
▫ Leather Parts ..........................335
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................335
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change
Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On instrument cluster display equipped vehicles, “Oil
Change Required” will be displayed in the cluster and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles,
“Change Oil” will flash in the odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” on the following pages for
the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary. Check
park brake function, adjust if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs ** X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid. X X
Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid. X X
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if using
your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing. (CVT only)
XX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
(CVT only)
X
Change the automatic transmission fluid (six-speed
only) if you frequently drive: on rough or unpaved
roads, on mountain roads, on short trips, in heavy city
traffic during hot weather, or if you use the vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
XX
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, heavy
loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial ser-
vice), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of
your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
XX X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L Engine
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.4L Engine
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking
engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an
incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the
full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine will
cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure
and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage
your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced
and tightened after adding oil.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine com-
partment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent
only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To
prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L, 2.4L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, in the owner’s informa-
tion kit.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing” section for the proper maintenance intervals.
A/C Air Filter Retaining Tabs
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause
deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when
using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
CAUTION! (Continued)
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
(Continued)
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact your local autho-
rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See your authorized dealer for service
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when
the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the
brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require fluid
replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid
reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any
leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the
hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized
dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch
system performance. Improper brake fluids may dam-
age the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch func-
tion and the ability to shift the transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant (Six-Speed Transmission)
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or
transmission malfunction, visit you authorized dealer im-
mediately to have the fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is frequently driven
on rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads, on short
trips, or in heavy city traffic during hot weather, or is used
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
for frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi, etc., change
the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule. In
addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant (CVT)
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid which
has the special friction coefficient additives necessary for
proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause belt slip and result
in a complete transmission failure! Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmis-
sion fluid level using special service tools. If you notice
fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your au-
thorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid
level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the ⬙Maintenance Plan⬙ for the proper maintenance
intervals. In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmis-
sion is disassembled for any reason.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) — AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) — AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire
Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
(Continued)
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently dam-
age this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are
not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Tire Rotation
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days,
you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution Cen-
ter labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed to for
easy cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats
as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........338
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................338
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .339
▫ Torque Specifications ....................339
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................341
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine ....................341
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................341
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............341
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........342
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......342
▫ MMT In Gasoline.......................342
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................342
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................343
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............344
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................344
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................345
▫ Engine ..............................345
▫ Chassis .............................346
9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, on the right front seat crossmember under the
carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with
the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system operating.
Vehicle Identification Number
Right Front Body VIN Location
338 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability,
the remaining system will still function with some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application and greater pedal force re-
quired to slow or stop. In addition, if the malfunction is caused
by an internal leak, as the brake fluid in the master cylinder
drops, the “Brake Warning Light” will light.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking perfor-
mance or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It
will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make
your vehicle harder to control. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 339
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
340 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L And 2.4L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide opti-
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted oc-
tane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly
blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved perfor-
mance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause
the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly communi-
cate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 341
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
342 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 343
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.6 Gallons 51 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified)
4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
344 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
(Continued)
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 345
CAUTION! (Continued)
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped Use only Mopar CVTF+4 Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If Equipped Use only Mopar SP-IV M Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
346 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission — If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE
80W-90 API GL 5.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE
80W-90 API GL 5.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should
be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4,
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 347
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 RADIO 130 ............................351
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ........357
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play........................353
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ...............355
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode .....357
䡵 RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO ........357
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ........357
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play........................362
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ...............363
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play .......365
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play ......365
▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .....366
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
Mode ...............................367
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped ............................369
䡵 RADIO 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED ............................369
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) —
If Equipped ...........................369
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped ............................369
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................369
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......371
▫ Radio Operation........................371
▫ CD Player ............................372
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .372
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device. . .372
10
▫ Using This Feature ......................373
▫ Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using
Radio Buttons .........................373
▫ Play Mode............................373
▫ List Or Browse Mode ....................375
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) ..........376
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED ........377
▫ Operation ............................379
▫ Help Command ........................379
▫ Cancel Command.......................380
▫ Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone .380
▫ Dial By Saying A Number.................381
▫ Call By Saying A Name ..................381
▫ Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone ...............381
▫ Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook .....382
▫ Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries ...........383
▫ Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry ...........383
▫ List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook . . . .384
▫ Phone Call Features .....................384
▫ Uconnect Phone Features .................386
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............390
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ...............................391
▫ General Information ....................400
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED .........400
▫ Voice Command System Operation ..........400
▫ Commands ...........................401
▫ Voice Training .........................404
䡵 RADIO OPERA
TION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .404
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........405
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............406
350 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
Radio 130
10
MULTIMEDIA 351
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM
or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time
and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble
tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level
from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select
the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and
push and release that button. If a button is not selected
352 MULTIMEDIA
within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored into
pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET
2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12
FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM sta-
tions).
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label
facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.
If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 inch (2.5 cm),
a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a
new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
10
MULTIMEDIA 353
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Radio 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt
to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other
side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause
damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the
current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK button
will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and
MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW
or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
354 MULTIMEDIA
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When
reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly
and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and
Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
10
MULTIMEDIA 355
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by
the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to
load than non-multisession discs
356 MULTIMEDIA
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase
with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to
use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3
player, or iPod, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Radio 130
10
MULTIMEDIA 357
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Multimedia”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If
Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature (if
equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature (if
equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with, or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
358 MULTIMEDIA
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
INFO Button
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM
or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time
and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble
tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level
from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or
10
MULTIMEDIA 359
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type
information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
360 MULTIMEDIA
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited
and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow you
to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, push
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The
minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the
right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select
the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and
push and release that button. If a button is not selected
within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored into
pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET
2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12
FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM sta-
tions).
DISC/AUX Button
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
10
MULTIMEDIA 361
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label
facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.
If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 inch (2.5 cm),
a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a
new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Radio 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt
to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other
side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause
damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
362 MULTIMEDIA
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the
current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK button
will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and
MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW
or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When
reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660
10
MULTIMEDIA 363
Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly
and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and
Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
364 MULTIMEDIA
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by
the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to
load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase
with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to
use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before
writing to the disc.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on
the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by
pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin play-
ing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the
following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name,
and Folder Name (if available).
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
10
MULTIMEDIA 365
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to
return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition
is OFF).
Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting
technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast.
The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio.
This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports,
news, entertainment, and programming for children, di-
rectly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may
begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service
that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio sys-
tem in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that
contains general information, including how to setup your
online listening account. For further information, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.siriusxm.com, or at www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian resi-
dents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
366 MULTIMEDIA
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position
and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected.
Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID
number will display. The Sirius ID number display will
time out in two minutes. Push any button on the radio to
exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode
Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes
should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the
loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on
or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking struc-
ture or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form
of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause
signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
10
MULTIMEDIA 367
SCAN Button
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the
next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing
to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN button a
second time.
INFO Button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return to
normal display).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function
is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with
the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited
and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the follow-
ing items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/SELECT
button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is
used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius sub-
scription.
368 MULTIMEDIA
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit
to push button memory, push the SET button. The symbol
SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the
button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and push
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
five seconds after pushing the SET button, the channel will
continue to play but will not be stored into push button
memory.
You may add a second channel to each push button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push
button memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pushing the push button twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
RADIO 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Multimedia” for further
details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia” for further
details.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
10
MULTIMEDIA 369
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
370 MULTIMEDIA
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/CD/
HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 371
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the player.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console or
glove compartment.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
NOTE: Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays
media, but does not use the iPod/MP3 control feature to
control the connected device.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compart-
ment.
372 MULTIMEDIA
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s AUX/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pushing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the AUX/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the AUX/USB/MP3
control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the
USB connector (if supported by the specific audio de-
vice).
Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the AUX/USB/MP3 control mode and access a
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button on
the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say ⬙USB⬙ or
⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the AUX/USB/MP3 control
mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start
playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to AUX/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod
or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In
AUX/USB Connector Ports
10
MULTIMEDIA 373
Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate
may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and
display data:
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previ-
ous track.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while play-
ing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR button
and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or push the VR
button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pushing and
holding the FF >> button.
• A single push backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the list,
or push the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous Track.⬙
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see the
associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for
that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to the
next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have
been viewed, the last INFO button push will go back to
the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or push
the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat Off.⬙
• Push the SCAN button to use AUX/USB/MP3 device
scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of each
track in the current list and then forward to the next
song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired
track, when it is playing the track, push the SCAN
button again. During Scan mode, pushing the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next
tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device,
or push the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or ⬙Shuffle
Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio display,
then the
shuffle mode is ON.
374 MULTIMEDIA
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling
through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or
external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track
detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played
is highlighted on the radio display, push the TUNE
control knob to select and start playing the track. Turn-
ing the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the
list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display may be noticeable.
During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in “wrap-
around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list,
just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to
the track faster.
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB
device:
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on
the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.
To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the same
PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level
menu of the iPod or external USB device.
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to
be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device,
then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in
that list. Not all iPod or external USB device sub-menu
levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another
shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device.
10
MULTIMEDIA 375
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage
the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guide-
lines.
• Placing items on the iPod or external USB device, or
connections to the iPod or external USB device in the
vehicle, can cause damage to the device and/or to the
connectors.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect phone system.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information on Bluetooth connectivity.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
radio or push the VR
button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the device
first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone
system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone
system, but just one can be selected and played.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect
phone system to list the audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR
button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.
376 MULTIMEDIA
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR
button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio
(BTSA) device. Only the current song that is playing will
display info.
UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone* using
simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or
“Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the sys-
tem will automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile,” Version
0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect website for supported
phones. For Uconnect customer support:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week).
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
10
MULTIMEDIA 377
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Uconnect Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect Phone
button and Voice Com-
mand button) that will enable you to access
the system. When you push the button you will hear the
word Uconnect followed by a BEEP. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
NOTE: The driver side upper windshield trim contains the
microphone for the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Command Button
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws.
Your attention should be focused on safely operating
the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Actual button location may vary with the radio.
The individual buttons are described in the “Op-
eration” section.
378 MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the Uconnect
website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service
provider or the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the
Uconnect Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone
and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure.
Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Phone Pairing,” the following compound command
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You can
also break the commands into parts and say each part of
the command when you are asked for it. For example,
you can use the compound form voice command
“Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the com-
pound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a
few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a
push of the Phone
button on the faceplate.
10
MULTIMEDIA 379
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few
instances the system will take you back to the previous
menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pair-
ing instructions:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Phone” and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifi-
cation Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter
into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit
PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the
initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone.
Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a
unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being the
highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones
to your Uconnect Phone. However, at any given time,
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your
Uconnect System. The priority allows the Uconnect
Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple
mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For
example, if priority three and priority five phones are
present in the vehicle, the Uconnect Phone will use the
priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You
can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any
time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this
section).
380 MULTIMEDIA
Dial By Saying A Number
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
• The system will prompt you to say the number you want
to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
• The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display of
certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previously
stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or down-
loaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the
phonebook, refer to “Add Names To Your Uconnect
Phonebook,” in this section.
• The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may ap-
pear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect) Phone-
book, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 381
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previous downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
tion.
Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob.”
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry,
if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phone-
book entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to add more phone
numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.
The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names
in the phonebook with each name having up to four
associated phone numbers and designations. Each lan-
guage has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only
in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported
by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically downloads
your mobile phone’s phonebook.
382 MULTIMEDIA
Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit.”
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when
the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the phone-
book. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile
and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” feature.
Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when
the vehicle is not in motion.
To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com-
mands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to
delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete, or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries from
the list, push the Voice Command
button while the
Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 383
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect Phone will ask
you which designation you wish to delete: home, work,
mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to
delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot
be deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
Command
button during the playing of the desired
name, and say “Call.”
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
• The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be ac-
cessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if
on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Push
the Phone
button to accept the call. To reject the call,
push and hold the Phone button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was re-
jected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
384 MULTIMEDIA
mobile phone. Push the Phone
button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call”
in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, push the Phone
button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold):
1. Push and hold the Phone
button until you hear a
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a second
phone call, as described under “Making a Second Call
While Current Call is in Progress.” After the second call
has established, push and hold the Phone
button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two
calls have been joined into one conference call.
10
MULTIMEDIA 385
Call Termination
To end a call in progress:
1. Momentarily push the Phone
button.
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is
a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent.
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
• The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available
on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends, or until
the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the
call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the
mobile phone.
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue on
the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration, after which
the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect
Phone to the mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile
phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
386 MULTIMEDIA
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to English,
Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice
commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook
is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the
paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
button and
say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency,
your mobile phone must be:
• Turned on.
• Paired to the Uconnect System.
• Have network coverage.
10
MULTIMEDIA 387
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance
phone number using the Voice Command system. To do
this, push the Phone
button and say “Setup,” fol-
lowed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted say
1-800-521-2779 for U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, 55-
14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working With Automated
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work
properly with the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
With Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice Com-
mand
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required
to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),you
can push the Voice Command
button and say, “3 7 4
6 # Send.” Saying a number, or sequence of numbers,
followed by “Send,” is also to be used for navigating
through an automated customer service center menu
structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
388 MULTIMEDIA
You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call
and then push the Voice Command
button and say,
“Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the name
or number and say the name of the phonebook entry
you wish to send. The Uconnect Phone will then send
the corresponding phone number associated with the
phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
of this feature.
Barge In – Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you wish
to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command
immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking “Would
you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you could push the
Voice Command
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
To turn confirmation prompts on or off using Voice Com-
mand:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say:
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such
as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your
mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will provide notifica-
tion to inform you of your phone and network status when
you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect
Phone. The status is given for roaming, network signal
strength, phone battery strength, etc.
10
MULTIMEDIA 389
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicles audio system.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the
Uconnect Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone or vice versa, push the Voice Command
button
and say “Transfer Call.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone user manual.
390 MULTIMEDIA
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
• The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, push the Voice Command
button
and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two
sections for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect Phone.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call.
If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect
Phone will return to using the highest priority phone
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m) the
vehicle.
Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Uconnect Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
Phone
button and say “Uconnect Tutorial.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 391
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect Phone
Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training
mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
• From outside the Uconnect Phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode), push and hold the Voice Command
button
for five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the “Voice
Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice Train-
ing” command.
You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System
will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
For best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch (1
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and
the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during
a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
392 MULTIMEDIA
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not
in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be
spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing num-
ber combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather conditions
• Operation from the driver’s seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
10
MULTIMEDIA 393
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load,” Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming
and Missed Calls.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message. If
you wish to hear the new message:
• Push the Phone
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message:
• Push the Phone
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Messages.”
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, push the Voice Command
button
while the system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction
5. L O L
6. Why
394 MULTIMEDIA
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See you in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Push the Phone
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth
ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
10
MULTIMEDIA 395
396 MULTIMEDIA
10
MULTIMEDIA 397
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
Primary Alternate (s)
four
five
six
seven
eight
398 MULTIMEDIA
Primary Alternate (s)
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
Primary Alternate (s)
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
10
MULTIMEDIA 399
Primary Alternate (s)
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This
device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod family of
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, sat-
ellite radio, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice
Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be
negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice
level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws.
Your attention should be focused on safely operating
the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you push the Voice Command
button, you will
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.
400 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds,
the system will present you with a list of options.
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists
options, push the Voice Command
button, listen for
the beep, and say your command.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the system
is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be
interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change
commands. This will become helpful once you start to
learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a
normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows
are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower is set to
low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Command
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume set-
ting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
10
MULTIMEDIA 401
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth Stream-
ing mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken
number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
402 MULTIMEDIA
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you may
say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may push the Voice Command
but-
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may push the Voice Command
button to stop playing memos. You proceed by
saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
10
MULTIMEDIA 403
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Main menu setup”
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice
“Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Push the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the
system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
404 MULTIMEDIA
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev-
ertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
10
MULTIMEDIA 405
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
406 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................408
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............408
▫ Prepare A List .........................408
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............408
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................408
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............409
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........409
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................409
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........409
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................409
▫ Service Contract .......................410
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............410
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................411
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............411
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .411
▫ In Canada ............................411
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............411
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
408 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 409
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located in the
owner’s information kit, for the terms and provisions of
FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market.
410 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 411
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
412 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............302
Adding Fuel ..............................225
Adding Washer Fluid........................293
Additives, Fuel ............................342
Adjust
Down .................................37
Forward ................................37
Rearward ...............................37
Up....................................37
AirBag .................................168
Air Bag Operation ........................169
Air Bag Warning Light .....................166
Enhanced Accident Response .............176, 281
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................281
If A Deployment Occurs ....................175
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................170
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............176
Side Air Bags ...........................171
Transporting Pets ........................193
Air Bag Light .......................111,166, 194
Air Bag Maintenance ........................176
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......297
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................295
Air Conditioning............................55
Air Conditioning Controls .....................55
Air Conditioning Filter ....................66, 296
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .............65, 67
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............295, 296
Air Conditioning System ................55, 64, 295
Air Pressure, Tires ..........................320
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................113
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .................25
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ......................367
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................301, 344
Capacities ..............................344
Disposal ...............................304
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................132
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................121
Assistance T
owing ..........................388
Assist, Hill Start ...........................134
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................44
Automatic Door Locks .....................30, 31
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............64
Automatic Transaxle .........................21
Fluid Level Check ........................310
Automatic Transmission ............206, 208, 307, 309
Fluid And Filter Changes ...............308, 310
Fluid Level Check ........................308
Fluid Type .......................307, 309, 346
414 INDEX
Gear Ranges .........................208, 214
Overheating ............................276
Special Additives .....................308, 309
Autostick .............................211,217
Axle Fluid ...............................346
Battery ..................................114
Charging System Light .....................114
Belts, Seat ................................194
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................298
B-Pillar Location ...........................315
Brake Assist System.........................134
Brake Fluid ...............................346
Brake, Parking.............................202
Brakes ..................................338
Brake System ..........................305, 338
Master Cylinder .........................305
Parking ...............................202
Warning Light ...........................112
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................207
Bulb Replacement ..........................249
Bulbs, Light ...........................196, 249
Calibration, Compass........................107
Camera, Rear .............................223
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........344
Capacities, Fluid ...........................344
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................225
Oil (Engine) ......................290, 291, 294
Power Steering ..........................220
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................303
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................193, 344
Cargo Area Cover ...........................75
Cargo Area Features .........................75
Cargo Compartment .........................75
Light ..................................75
Luggage Carrier ..........................93
Cargo Light ...............................75
Cargo Load Floor ...........................76
Cargo Tie-Downs ...........................7
7
Car Washes...............................332
Cellular Phone .........................377, 404
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...............251
Certification Label ..........................226
Chains, Tire ..............................329
Changing A Flat Tire .....................256, 311
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .128
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............193
Checks, Safety.............................193
12
INDEX 415
Child Restraint ............................178
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................181
Child Restraints .........................178
Child Seat Installation .....................190
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........188
Infants And Child Restraints ................179
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......183
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........180
Seating Positions .........................182
Child Safety Locks ..........................32
Clean Air Gasoline .........................341
Cleaning
Wheels ................................327
Climate Control ............................55
Clock................................351, 358
Clutch ..................................305
Clutch Fluid ..............................305
Coin Holder ...............................86
Cold Weather Operation......................200
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................406
Compact Spare Tire .........................326
Compass.................................109
Compass Calibration ........................107
Compass Variance ..........................108
Connector
UCI ..................................372
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...........372
Console ..................................86
Contract, Service ...........................410
Coolant (Antifreeze).........................344
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............303
Cooling System.........................292, 300
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................302
Coolant Level ....................293, 301, 304
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................304
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................301
Inspection ..............................304
Points T
o Remember ......................304
Pressure Cap ............................303
Radiator Cap ...........................303
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........301, 345
Corrosion Protection ........................332
Cupholders ...............................86
Customer Assistance ........................408
Dealer Service .............................293
Defroster, Windshield........................194
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................52
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................127
416 INDEX
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.....................47
Dipsticks
Power Steering ..........................220
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................304
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .......32
Door Locks ..............................29
KeyFob................................29
Remote ................................29
Remote Keyless Entry ......................29
Door Locks, Automatic .......................30
Door Opener, Garage.........................78
Downshifting .............................206
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................36
Driving..................................240
Off-Pavement ...........................240
Off-Road ..............................240
Electrical Power Outlets.......................89
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................46
Electronic Brake Control System ................133
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................132
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...................140
Traction Control System ....................136
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........220
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............136
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........115
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking .............................256, 311
Jump Starting ...........................272
Towing ................................279
Emission Control System Maintenance............128
Engine ...............................290, 291
Air Cleaner .............................297
Block Heater ............................201
Break-In Recommendations .................201
Checking Oil Level .......................292
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................293, 301, 345
Cooling ............................292, 300
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................193, 344
Jump Starting ...........................272
Oil ............................294, 344,
345
Oil Filler Cap .....................290, 291, 294
Oil Filter ...............................295
Oil Selection ............................294
Oil Synthetic ............................295
Overheating ............................275
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........176, 281
Ethanol..................................341
12
INDEX 417
Exhaust Gas Caution.....................193, 344
Exhaust System ........................193, 299
Exterior Lights ..........................47, 196
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................297
Air Conditioning ......................66, 296
Engine Oil ..........................295, 345
Engine Oil Disposal .......................295
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................249
Turn Signal ......................124, 196, 250
Flooded Engine Starting ......................200
Fluid, Brake ..............................346
Fluid Capacities............................344
Fluid Leaks...............................196
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle ......................310
Automatic Transmission ....................308
Cooling System ......................293, 301
Power Steering ..........................220
Fog Lights .............................48, 250
Folding Rear Seat ...........................39
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................249
Four Wheel Drive ..........................219
Systems ...............................219
Four Wheel Drive Operation ..................219
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................277
Fuel ....................................341
Adding ...............................225
Additives ..............................342
Capacity ...............................344
Clean Air ..............................341
Ethanol ...............................341
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................225
Gasoline ...............................341
Light .................................121
Materials Added .........................342
Methanol ..............................341
Octane Rating ........................341,
345
Tank Capacity ...........................344
Fueling..................................225
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .............78, 84
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..............128, 225, 226
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................341
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................341, 344
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................341
Gear Ranges...........................208, 214
Gear Select Lever Override....................276
418 INDEX
General Information.........................400
Glass Cleaning ............................335
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................229
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................229
GVWR ..................................227
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect)..................377
Hazard Warning Flasher......................249
Headlights ...............................250
Cleaning ...............................332
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........47
On With Wipers ........................49, 53
Passing ................................47
Replacing ..............................250
Switch .................................47
Head Restraints ..........................40, 41
Heated Mirrors .............................46
Heated Seats...............................38
Heater ...................................55
Heater, Engine Block ........................201
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......47
Hill Descent Control ........................141
Hill Start Assist ............................134
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................231
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)................78
Hood Release ..............................72
Ignition ..................................21
Key ................................19, 21
Ignition Key Removal ........................21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................23
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................44
Instrument Cluster..........................124
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................335
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ...............252
Interior And Instrument Lights..................50
Interior Appearance Care .....................334
Interior Lights..............................50
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............52
Introduction ................................4
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ..............376, 403
Jacking Instructions .........................257
Jack Location .............................256
Jack
Operation ......................256, 257, 311
Jump Starting .............................272
Key-In Reminder............................23
12
INDEX 419
Key, Programming ..........................24
Key, Replacement ...........................24
Keys ....................................19
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................23
Lane Change And Turn Signals.................250
Lane Change Assist ..........................49
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................153
Latches..................................196
Hood ..................................72
Leaks, Fluid ..............................196
Life Of Tires ..............................323
Liftgate (Sedan).............................74
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .................54
Light Bulbs ...........................196, 249
Lights...................................196
AirBag .........................111,166, 194
Back-Up ...............................250
Brake Assist Warning ......................139
Brake Warning ..........................112
Cargo .................................75
Center Mounted Stop ......................251
Cruise ................................126
Daytime Running .........................47
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................47
Exterior ...............................196
Fog................................48, 250
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................249
Headlights ..............................47
Headlights On With Wipers ...............49, 53
Headlight Switch .........................47
High Beam ..............................47
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................47
Instrument Cluster ........................47
Interior ................................50
License ................................251
Lights On Reminder .......................49
Low Fuel ..............................121
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........116
Map Reading ............................50
Park ..................................124
Seat Belt Reminder .......................111
Security Alarm ........................26, 113
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............117
Traction
Control .........................139
Turn Signal ....................49, 124, 196, 250
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .......124
Loading Vehicle............................226
Tires..................................315
Locks....................................29
420 INDEX
Automatic Door ..........................30
Child Protection ..........................32
Door ..................................29
Power Door .............................30
Lubrication, Body ..........................298
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) .....................93
Lug Nuts ................................339
Lumbar Support ............................36
Maintenance Schedule .......................285
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).....116,128
Manual, Service............................411
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check .....................310, 311
Manual Transmission ........................307
Fluid Level Check ........................307
Frequency Of Fluid Change .................307
Lubricant Selection .................307, 310, 346
Map/Reading Lights .........................50
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .....................305
Methanol ................................341
Mini-Trip Computer.........................109
Mirrors ..................................44
Automatic Dimming .......................44
Electric Powered ..........................46
Exterior Folding ..........................45
Heated .................................46
Outside ................................45
Rearview ...............................44
Vanity .................................46
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................142
Mopar Parts ..............................411
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................201
Occupant Restraints.........................150
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................341
Oil, Engine ........................294, 344, 345
Capacity ...............................344
Change Interval .........................294
Checking ..............................292
Disposal ...............................295
Filter ..............................295, 345
Filter Disposal ...........................295
Identification
Logo .......................294
Materials Added To .......................295
Pressure Warning Light ....................114
Recommendation .....................294, 344
Synthetic ..............................295
12
INDEX 421
Viscosity ...............................294
Oil Filter, Change ..........................295
Oil Filter, Selection..........................295
Oil Pressure Light ..........................114
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................127
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) ...............78
Operating Precautions .......................127
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............5
Overheating, Engine ........................275
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual)............5,411
Paint Care................................332
Parking Brake .............................202
Passing Light ..............................47
Personal Settings ...........................105
Pets ....................................193
Phone, Cellular ............................377
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) .................377
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........315
Power
Door Locks ..............................30
Mirrors ................................46
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............89
Steering ............................219, 220
Sunroof ................................70
Transfer Unit ............................311
Windows ...............................68
Power Seats
Down .................................37
Forward ................................37
Rearward ...............................37
Tilt ...................................37
Up....................................37
Power Steering Fluid ........................346
Power Transfer Unit .....................311,346
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................161
Preparation For Jacking ......................256
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................161
Programmable Electronic Features...............105
Radial Ply Tires ............................321
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............303
Radio 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode .........357
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ............351
Radio 130
With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio ..................366
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ............357
422 INDEX
Radio Frequency
General Information .....................21, 25
Radio Operation ...........................404
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................310
Rear Camera ..............................223
Rear Drive Assembly ........................310
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .........................74
Rear Seat, Folding ...........................39
Rearview Mirrors ...........................44
Rear Wiper/Washer..........................54
Recreational Towing.........................239
Reformulated Gasoline.......................341
Refrigerant ...............................296
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................151
Remote Control
Security Alarm ...........................25
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........371
Remote Starting System .......................26
Replacement Bulbs .........................249
Replacement Keys ...........................24
Replacement Tires ..........................323
Reporting Safety Defects......................411
Restraint, Head ..........................40, 41
Restraints, Child ...........................178
Retractable Cargo Area Cover...................75
Roll Over Warning ...........................4
Roof Type Carrier ...........................93
Rotation, Tires.............................329
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................194
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................196
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................411
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................193
Safety Information, Tire ......................311
Safety Tips ...............................193
Satellite Radio Antenna ......................367
Schedule, Maintenance.......................285
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......157
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........162
Energy Management Feature ................161
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................155
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................153
Lap/Shoulder
Belt Untwisting ...............156
Pregnant Women .........................161
Seat Belt Extender ........................160
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................161
Seat Belt Reminder .......................151
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................334
Seat Belt Reminder .........................151
12
INDEX 423
Seat Belts .............................151, 194
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................157
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........157
Child Restraint ..........................178
Extender ...............................160
Front Seat .......................151, 153, 155
Inspection ..............................194
Operating Instructions .....................155
Pregnant Women .........................161
Pretensioners ...........................161
Rear Seat ..............................153
Reminder ..............................111
Untwisting Procedure .....................156
Seats..................................34, 37
Adjustment ...........................34, 37
Heated .................................38
Lumbar Support ..........................36
Rear Folding .............................39
Seatback Release ..........................36
Tilting .................................36
Security Alarm ..........................25, 113
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............345
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................23
Sentry Key Programming......................24
Sentry Key Replacement ......................24
Service Assistance ..........................408
Service Contract ...........................410
Service Manuals ...........................411
Settings, Personal ..........................105
Setting The Clock .......................351, 358
Shift Lever Override ........................276
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission ..............205
Shoulder Belts.............................153
Signals, Turn .......................124, 196, 250
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................329
Snow Tires ...............................325
Spare Tire .........................256, 326, 327
Spark Plugs ..............................345
Speed Contr
ol
Accel/Decel ............................223
Cancel ................................222
Resume ...............................222
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................220
Starting .................................199
Automatic Transmission ....................199
Cold Weather ...........................200
Engine Fails To Start ......................200
Manual Transmission ......................199
Remote ................................26
Starting Procedures .........................199
424 INDEX
Steering ..................................43
Power .............................219, 220
Tilt Column .............................43
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................371
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .371
Storage ..................................331
Storage Bin................................87
Storage, Vehicle.............................66
Stuck, Freeing .............................277
Sunroof
Closing ................................71
Opening ................................70
Sun Roof .................................70
Sun Visor Extension .........................47
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag ..........168
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................295
System, Remote Starting ......................26
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............64
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo.......................77
Tilt
Down .................................37
Up....................................37
Tilt Steering Column .........................43
Tire And Loading Information Placard............315
Tire Markings .............................312
Tires..........................196, 318, 326, 330
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................323
Air Pressure ............................318
Chains ................................329
Changing ...........................256, 311
Compact Spare ..........................326
General Information ...................318, 326
High Speed .............................320
Inflation Pressures ........................320
Jacking .............................256, 311
Life Of Tires ............................323
Load Capacity .......................315, 316
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............142
Pressure Warning Light ....................117
Quality Grading .........................330
Radial ................................321
Replacement ............................323
Rotation ...............................329
Safety .............................3
11,318
Snow Tires .............................325
Spare Tire .......................256, 326, 327
Spinning ...............................322
Trailer Towing ...........................234
Tread Wear Indicators .....................322
12
INDEX 425
Tire Safety Information.......................311
Tire Service Kit ........264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 270, 271
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................233
Towing ..................................228
24-Hour Towing Assistance .................388
Disabled Vehicle .........................279
Guide .................................232
Recreational ............................239
Weight ................................232
Towing Assistance ..........................388
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............239
Traction Control ...........................136
Trailer Towing.............................228
Cooling System Tips ......................238
Hitches ................................231
Minimum Requirements ....................233
Tips ..................................237
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................233
Wiring ................................235
Trailer Towing Guide ........................232
Trailer Weight .............................232
Transaxle
Automatic ..............................21
Transmission
Automatic ....................206, 208, 307, 309
Fluid ...........................307, 309, 346
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .......78
Transporting Pets ..........................193
Tread Wear Indicators .......................322
Trip Computer ............................109
Turn Signals ........................49, 124, 250
UCI Connector ............................372
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ...............390
Phone Call Features .......................384
Phone Features ..........................386
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)..................377
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................330
Universal Consumer
Interface (UCI) Connector .....372
Universal Transmitter ........................78
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................156
Vanity Mirrors .............................46
Variance, Compass..........................108
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............338
Vehicle Loading ........................226, 316
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ...........25
Vehicle Storage..........................66, 331
426 INDEX
Voice Command
Commands .............................401
System Operation ........................400
Voice Training ...........................404
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................400
Warning, Roll Over ...........................4
Warnings And Cautions .......................7
Warranty Information .......................410
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................293
Washers, Windshield .........................53
Washing Vehicle ...........................332
Wheel And Wheel Trim ......................327
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................327
Wind Buffeting .............................71
Window Fogging ...........................66
Windows .................................68
Power .................................68
Windshield Defroster ........................194
Windshield Washers .......................51, 53
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................298
Windshield Wipers ..........................51
Wiper Blade Replacement.....................298
Wipers, Intermittent .........................52
12
INDEX 427
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Compass
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017 Compass
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
17MK49-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2017
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
